Yamaha RX-A1030 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-A1030

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

RX-A1030BL

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

PREPARATIONS 14

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 41

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

PLAYBACK 49

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

En 3

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

CONFIGURATIONS 92

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 117

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 119

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

En 4

APPENDIX 129

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Accessories En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region

of purchase.

 CD-ROM

(Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise

specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”

and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.141

Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker

system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows

you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.41

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.53

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.57

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.20

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.65

•USB

. p.69

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.72

• Internet radio

. p.75

•AirPlay

. p.77

3D and 4K signals supported

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.50

Control

Audio/Video

(via HDMI/MHL)

Smartphone/Tablet

Control

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.31)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Easy operation and wireless music

playback from iPhone or Android device

By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the

Yamaha website for details.

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.53)

Connecting front presence speakers allows you to

create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own

room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence

speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker

(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound.

❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.57)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays

back the selected source with the least circuitry, which

lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

❑ Easy operation with a TV screen

You can navigate through different types of content

(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or

easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.

❑ Low power consumption

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption (p.117).

BD/DVD

player

Game

console

Camcorder

Set-top box

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.90).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.106).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.109).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to use the supplied remote control to operate

external devices…

devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.123).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.122). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.128).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.92)

• SCENE settings (p.95)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.98)

• Various function settings (p.101)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.118)

• System settings (p.119)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.109)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.110)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.111)

• An iPod is being charged (p.65)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.10).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.57).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.9).

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

52 3 41

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.87).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.86).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.88).

Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2

(p.85).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.56).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.52).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.50).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2 Enables/disables the audio output to

Zone2 (p.84).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)

that is controlled by the keys and knobs

on the front panel (p.84).

H INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.86).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.59).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.58).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.59).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.58).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.69) or an iPod

(p.65).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.34, 35) or a smartphone (p.35).

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

SCENE

1234

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

INFO

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

9 A C D H I KE J LB0

M N O

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

(U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station

signal.

3 ZONE2

Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.84).

4 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

5 PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.85)

6 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.86).

7 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

8 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

9 ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.88) is working.

0 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57) is

working.

A CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.53) is working. “CINEMA

DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) is activated.

B Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

C Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

Z Front presence speaker (L)

X Front presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBL SBRSB

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED PARTY

0 BCB

4 53

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.33).

2 DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

3 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.37).

4 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.31).

5 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.37).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(composite video/S-video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or

S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting

to a Zone2 video monitor (p.81).

7 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.82).

9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.32).

0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.31).

A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(component video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a Zone2

video monitor (p.81).

B REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.83).

C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.38).

D RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

E VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.39).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

21 3 7 8 D5 6 CA B9:4

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12

F ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36).

G AUDIO 1–4 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.33).

H MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel

output and inputting audio signals (p.38).

I ZONE OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.81).

J PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or

to an external power amplifier (p.24).

K SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.15).

L AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

H K LGF I J

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE key

Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.124).

This key lights up in green after pressed.

RECEIVER key

Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.124). This key

lights up in orange after pressed.

RECEIVER z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

TUNER FM/AM radio

4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch

Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by

the remote control (p.84).

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.50).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.52).

7 External device operation keys

Select menus for external devices (p.124).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.67).

(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program

(p.60).

A Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.58).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you play back and perform other operations for external

devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is

selected (p.124).

B Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.52).

C INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.86).

D SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.59).

F TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.123).

G HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.49).

H PA RT Y k e y

Turns on/off the party mode (p.85).

I VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

J MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

K OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.87).

L DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.86).

M CODE SET key

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the

remote control (p.123).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.123).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.15)

Basic speaker configuration (p.16)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.20)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.26)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.31)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

5 Connecting to a network (p.37)

Connect the unit to a network.

6 Connecting other devices (p.37)

Connect external devices such as recording devices.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.39)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language

(p.40)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.41)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20).

Functions of each speaker

• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.

However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.53).

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also

produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround

back (L)

Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.

Surround

back (R)

Front

presence (L)

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP

3D (p.53), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional

sound field in your room.

Front

presence (R)

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces

bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the

unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 7.1+2-channel system

(using both surround back and front presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.53).

❑ 7.1-channel system

(using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural

3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying

5.1-channel contents.

❑ Front 5.1-channel system

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front

presence speakers (*2).

If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence

speakers (*4).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.24).

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.103)

7+2 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●

Center 3 ●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●*3

Surround (R) 5 ●●*3

Surround

back (L)

6 ● *1

Surround

back (R)

7 ● *1

Front

presence (L)

E ● *2 *4

Front

presence (R)

R ● *2 *4

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

–

UC U

ZONE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2

ROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

FRONT

Audio pin cable

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi

amplifier, etc.) to build an

extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21

■ Available speaker configurations

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103)

in the “Setup” menu.

❑ 5ch BI-AMP

Main zone

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign

(p.103)

Page

Output

channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External

power

amplifier

(required)

5  5ch BI-AMP 21

7 

Surround

back

5ch BI-AMP +SB 22

7 +1 (Zone2) 7ch +1ZONE 22

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 (not used)

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22

❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE

Bi-amp

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Main zone

Zone2

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.84), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the

“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.

■ Connecting Zone2 speakers

When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting (p.103) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.81).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

2 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

3 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

4 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 )

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

HDMI

3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

1 2 34

The unit (rear)

4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

PB PR

ONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S2000)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 25

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

❑ HDMI/MHL jack

Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL

cable.

• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both

HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on

your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an

HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an

HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL

connection” (p.35).

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ S VIDEO jack

Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)

and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video

cable.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

MHL cable

COMPONEN

AV 1

Component video cable

S-video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks

available on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

■

Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.109) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.140).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).

2 Connecting a TV

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback

devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the

unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.141).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a

TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Does your TV support

Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Does your TV support

HDMI Control?

Does your TV have an

HDMI input jack?

■ Connection Method 3 (p.29)

■ Connection Method 2 (p.28)

■ Connection Method 1 (p.26)

■ Connection Method 4 (p.30)

Yes

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT 1 jack

HDMI input

(ARC-compatible)

The unit (rear)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)

and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

c Press ON SCREEN.

d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

h Press ON SCREEN.

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu is set

to “On”.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio

cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

PLA

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 28

■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.109) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.140).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and

playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

PLA

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 29

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.140).

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and

network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 30

■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following

connections.

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

V OUT

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

S VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.49).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for

Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.82).

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.65)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.69)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,

D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.90) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/D

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

3 Connecting playback devices

OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIG

B PR

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

R L R RL L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

12V

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

1 2

TV connection

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ S-video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZON

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

S-video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(S VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(S-video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 33

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL

(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.90) in the “Option” menu.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 34

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.65) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.69).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the

video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from

the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in

“Video Out” (p.93) in the “Input” menu.

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 35

❑ MHL connection

Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an

MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the

mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input

videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).

• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.

• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.

• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and

numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the

mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.

• If “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio

to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby

mode.

• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.

– The unit is turned on.

– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a

video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable).

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX

(VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL

IN) jack.

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

MHL

Mobile device

MHL output

The unit (front)

DISPLAYRETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

PROGRAM

HDMI/

MHL

OPTICAL

LAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 2.1A

5V 1A

V RL

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 36

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling the AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SU

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4

FM/AM antenna connections

5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 37

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.110).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Connecting recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output video/audio signals selected as the input.

• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

5 Connecting to a network

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV

YPB PR

B PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

L R

(4 RADIO)

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

6 Connecting other devices

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUD IO 3AU DIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

AV OUT

The unit (rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video/audio

recording device

1 2 3 4 5

Network connections

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 38

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output

You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an

SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,

the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using

“Video Out” (p.93) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.

• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing

speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker

configuration.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are

not available.

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.115) in the

“Setup” menu.

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB P

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

ENNA

adio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

The unit (rear)

MULTI CH

INPUT jacks

Channel output

(Center)

Device with analog

multi-channel output

(Subwoofer)

(Surround

back)

(Surround)

(Front)

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT

EMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System connection

input

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

1 2 3 4 5 6

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 39

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

7 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L L

INGLE

RE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V-

240V

110V-

120V

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT

EMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R RL L

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Power cable connection

8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 40

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Language setting

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

B NE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that

the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function

at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

According to your speaker configuration, configure

the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the

“Setup” menu.

For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic”

(default).

For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set

to the appropriate setting.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position (same height as your ears) and connect it

to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at

your listening position (same height

as your ears). We recommend the

use of a tripod as a microphone

stand. You can use the tripod

screws to stabilize the microphone.

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

B NE

RECEIVER z

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, change the measuring method

(multi/single).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate

external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.44)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.43)

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different

positions in the room. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit the area defined by those positions

(multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RECEIVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process (about 3 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48).

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.45).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.45).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the

correct polarity (+/-).

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 46

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.100).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 47

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 48

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.45) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.45) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80

ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the

subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as

possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 49

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)

• Playing back iPod music (p.65)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.69)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.72)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.75)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.77)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.88).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.50).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113)), you

can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

OUT1+2

HDMIOUTSel.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 50

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.94).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)

Input

Input (p.49) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.90) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.49) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

Sound Program (p.52) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.107) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.57) Off On On On

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 51

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.124) to register it.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.95) in the “Scene” menu.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.96) in the “Scene” menu.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SETComplete

SCENE1

Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround

Video Video Mode

Vol ume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

R. DE

SCENE

SOURCE

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 52

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.54).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.55).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.56).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.56).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.57).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.57).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press

ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “Sound Program” menu (p.97).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the

straight decode mode (p.56) is automatically selected.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.117).

Selecting the sound mode

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

P-

MEN

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

B NE

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 53

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize

Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you

to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert

halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.88) in the

“Option” menu to “Off”.

• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full

effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence

speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using

the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and

7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit

utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce

up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We

recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more

effective stereoscopic sound field.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel

speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

HallinVienna

CLASSICAL

MUSIC

“CINEMA DSP n” lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 54

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 55

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 56

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.89) in the “Option” menu to a

setting other than “Off”.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.137).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

STRAIGHT

bPro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

bPLIIx Movie

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

SUR.DECODE

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

B NE

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus

– Using the multi-zone function

– Output from the AV OUT jacks

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.90) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PUREDIRECT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

EnhancerOn

“ENHANCER” lights up

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

B NE

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 58

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ

STEP”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• (U.S.A. model only)

You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio

reception in “Audio Mode” (p.90) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the

monaural reception mode.)

• (Except for U.S.A. model)

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.91) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

ENHAN

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

TUNING

BAND

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 59

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD

Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.62, p.64).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.58)

to tune into the desired radio station.

• (U.S.A. model only)

To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.60)

after tuning into the radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.62, p.64).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PresetOK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

Preset number

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

02:Empty

Preset

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 60

HD Radio™ tuning

(U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM

radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting

provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and

reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental

program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio

programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further

information on HD Radio Technology, visit

“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating

CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM

broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data

(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)

from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).

When tuning into an HD Radio station

• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If

you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down

TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.

• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.90), you can tune into the

analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.

■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program

You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD

Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).

Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio

program.

You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)

directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select

program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).

■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information

You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the item switches.

About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.

• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station

or period of time.



Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience

of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,

HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.



Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.

These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as

deep cuts into traditional genre.



Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio

stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today?s

FM and FM sounds like a CD.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz1

HD1/3

Relative/total program number

(when multiple programs are available)

“HD” lights up Absolute program number

(when multiple programs are available)

Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign)

Category Station name (call sign), program category

Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title

Album Station name (call sign), album title

DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit

Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz3

HD2/3

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Category

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

RhythmandBlu

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9-1

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

ENHAN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENT

MODE

INFO

TUNING

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 61

■ Holding HD Radio™ information display

You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the

TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.

When the desired HD Radio information is

displayed, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”

(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.

The current information will remain displayed until

“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode

or if another input source or another radio station is selected.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV

You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on

the TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

❑ Playback screen

1 HOLD indicator

Flashes when the hold function (p.61) is enabled.

2 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program

number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program

category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 HD indicator

Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.

4 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Program (+/-)

Selects an audio program (when

multiple audio programs are

available).

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 62

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1

(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.64).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers HD Radio

(FM/AM) stations and FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProgramType

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

CLASSICS

FM98.50MHz

Information

Frequency (always displayed)

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

INFO

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.62), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 Band icon

(Except for U.K. and Europe models)

Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

TPFM101.30MHz

TrafficProgram

Finished

Traffic information station (frequency)

• (U.S.A. model only)

See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.61) to operate the radio on the TV.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 65

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)

is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite

AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To

select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.67).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playing back iPod music

Made for.

iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation)

iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad

(as of April 2013)

OPTION

SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILEN

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 66

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.67).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.68) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 67

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.68) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

s Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

MODE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 68

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 69

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage

device for more information.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC

files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer

of the USB storage device.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

• The unit does not support a USB hub.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use

extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

OPTION

SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILEN

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

USB storage device

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 70

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 71

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 72

You can play back music files stored on your PC or

DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router

(p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)

are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing

and allow media to be shared with the device.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and

configure the media sharing settings.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 73

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q /w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 74

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.94).

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 75

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Listening to Internet radio

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 76

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by

selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the

following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need

the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal

account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.118)

in the “Information” menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to

stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control s Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 77

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on

the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same

router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP

address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information”

menu.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music

contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or

display the playback screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon

( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are

connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and

select the unit (network name of the unit) as the

audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and

starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac

with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of April 2013)

iTunes

Router

Playback starts

iPod

Starts playback

on iTunes

or iPod

The unit

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 78

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.93) in the “Input” menu

to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 79

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input

sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in

another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main

zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in another room

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.81

• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources

can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you

need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of the unit.

■ Enjoying videos/music in another room

You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.81

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.81

• Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network

sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in

Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog video/audio jacks of the unit.

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you

connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.141).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone

configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best

meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Video

(ZONE OUT)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 80

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Connection

TV: p.82

• Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of

an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of

the unit.

Preparing Zone2

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection

method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or

an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker

cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23).

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Video/audio

(HDMI)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers or an external amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or

come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit

or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will

appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 81

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in

Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to

the external amplifier.

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back

analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2.

Depending on the video input jacks available on your video

monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2

video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video

monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the

video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player

via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR

OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video

monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to

“Zone2”.

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

YPB PR

YPB

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZON

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKER

SURROUND BSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R

FRONT

AUDIO

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2) jacks

Zone2

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CESURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

L R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(any of COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO, S VIDEO)

Zone2

Main zone

Video input

(any of component video,

composite video, S-video)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 82

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to

play back videos/audio

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back

videos/audio at Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can

enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone2).

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the

video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.31).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected

to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI

OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

TWORK

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

YPB PR YPB

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

XIAL

NTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUD IO 2AU DIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTE

SUBWOOF

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2

Main zone

HDMI input

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

(Example: using an AV amplifier)

Zone2

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the

following operations is performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 83

■ Operating the unit from Zone2

(remote connection)

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the

supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal

receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.123).

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using

Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit

does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

B PR

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2

ONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FR

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

R L R RL

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Zone2

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 84

Controlling Zone2

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Press RECEIVER z.

Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.

When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front

display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you

connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.141).

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the

main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)

• Playing back iPod music (p.65)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.69)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.72)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.75)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.77)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the web control

to control Zone2. For details on the web control function, refer to

“Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the

main zone.

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

1 2

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

R. DE

MAIN/ZONE2

RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85

■ Other operations for Zone2

The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.

Adjusting the volume

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display.

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

• When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the

following functions are not available.

– Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance

– Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music

that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,

stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this

function when you want to use main zone music as background

music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.113) in

the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).

• If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2

output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

SCENE

PARTY

PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 86

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–4

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

* (U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned

into an HD Radio station (p.60).

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.62).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

AudioDecoder

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

AV1

Information

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

INFO

DISPLAY

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 87

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ToneControl

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

Adaptive DRC

(Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 88

Dialogue Adjust

(Dialog Adjust)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 89

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 89

Extended Surround

(EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources

when surround back speakers are used.

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 89

Subwoofer

Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 90

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 90

Video Mode

(Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

Audio Select

(Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than

one audio connection is made for one input source.

Audio Mode

(Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM

radio reception.

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 88

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to

playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a

high volume.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).

Settings

Hold/Unhold

(Hold/Unhold)

(U.S.A. model only)

Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is

tuned into an HD Radio station.

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.68),

USB storage device (p.71), or media server (p.74).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.68),

USB storage device (p.71), or media server (p.74).

—

Item Function Page

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 89

■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you

can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

0 to 3

Default

❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this

setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence

speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.53) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Default

■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround

back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing

back those sources.

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Ideal position

Auto (Auto)

(default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

(bPLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off (Off)

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit

reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 90

❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.57).

Settings

Default

TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

■ Video Mode (Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in “Processing” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

■ Audio Select (Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for

one input source.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.

• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).

Settings

• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Direct (Direct)

(default)

Disables the video signal processing.

Auto (Auto) (default)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt

(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or

OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Auto (Auto) (default)

Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the

signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.

Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 91

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Stereo (Stereo)

(default)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 92

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 93

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 93

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 93

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 93

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Input sources

TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Default

USB: V-AUX

Others: Off

Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited (default)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Off Does not output video.

AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 94

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.50) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 95

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.51).

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

❑ Device Control

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to

the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI

Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141).

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 95

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 96

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 96

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 96

❑ Detail

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with

low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and

include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.50) for the selected scene.

Input Input (p.49), Audio Select (p.90)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.49)

Mode Sound Program (p.52), Pure Direct Mode (p.107), Enhancer (p.57)

Sound Tone Control (p.88), Adaptive DRC (p.88)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.88), Dialogue Lift (p.89), Dialogue Level

(p.89), Subwoofer Trim (p.90), Extended Surround (p.89)

Video Video Mode (p.108)

Volume Master Volume (p.49)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.106), Delay (p.107)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.103), PEQ Select (p.105)

Check or uncheck

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 97

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (Sound Program menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 98

Sound Program menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

■ Settings for sound programs

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie

(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx

Music* (bPLII Music*),

bPLIIx Game* (bPLII

Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,

Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1 ms to 49 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0ms to 250ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto (default), Off

7ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the right and left

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the front

presence speakers.

0 to 10 (default: 5)

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

front presence speakers do

not produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off (default), On

Item Function Settings

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 99

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off (default), On

Select “On” to wrap front right/left

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 7 (default: 3)

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to +3 (default: 0)

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 100

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 101

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 41

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 103

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 103

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 103

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 103

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 104

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 104

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 104

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 104

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 104

Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 105

Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 105

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 105

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 105

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 105

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 106

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 106

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 106

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 107

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 107

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 107

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 107

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 107

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 107

Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 108

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 109

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 109

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 110

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 102

Network

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 110

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 111

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 111

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 111

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 112

Zone2 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 112

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 112

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 112

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 113

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 113

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 113

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 113

HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 113

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 113

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 114

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 114

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 114

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 114

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 115

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 115

DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 115

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 116

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 116

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 117

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 117

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 103

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1 (default), Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2

subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

❑ Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic (default)

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone

and Zone2 speakers (p.22).

5ch BI-AMP

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including

bi-amp front speakers) (p.21).

5ch BI-AMP +SB

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including

bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using

an external amplifier (p.22).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 104

❑ Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

❑ Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

❑ Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

❑ Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.

Settings

❑ Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

Small x2 (default)

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Use

Normal

(default)

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not

reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front

speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 105

❑ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.

❑ Bass Cross Over

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker

whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be

produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Default

3.00 m (10.0 ft)

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel

low-frequency components.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 106

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

❑ Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4

Settings

❑ Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV

connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto (default)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 107

❑ Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Default

0 ms

• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.57).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off (default)

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max

Volume”.)

Auto (default)

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from

the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with

the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,

the wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On (default)

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

❑ Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.121) in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on

your TV normally.)

❑ Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or

2160p (4K) signals.

Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.141).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

❑ TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–4

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting

an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

❑ ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to

“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

❑ Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit

when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) is set to “Main”.

❑ Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to

the unit.

Settings

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby

Sync”.

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto (default)

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110

❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection

keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby

mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

❑ DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

❑ Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

❑ MAC Address 1–10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set

Configures the Zone2 settings.

❑ Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable

volume adjustments for Zone2.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.103) is set to “7ch +1ZONE.

❑ Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

❑ Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Off (default)

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113

❑ Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

Settings

❑ Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone

Set” (p.112).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,

S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.141).

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.85).

Choice

Target: Zone2

Settings

Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable (default)

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

❑ Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”.

❑ Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

❑ Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Picture 1 (default),

Picture 2, Picture 3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

❑ Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching

when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

❑ Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ DC OUT

Configures the DC OUT jack setting.

❑ Power Mode

Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT

jack.

Settings

Power (default)

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High (default)

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

All (default)

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Continuous (default)

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of

the power state (on/standby) of the unit.

Main Zone Power

Sync.

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is

turned on.

(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for

the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 117

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off (default) Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English (default) English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 118

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.128).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.111)

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.120)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.120)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.119)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.120)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume for Zone2

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 119

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 119

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 120

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 120

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

120

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 120

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 121

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

121

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 121

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 122

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 122

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8  MIN (default)

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 120

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press CODE SET on the remote control.

Press RECEIVER.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.

• The registered remote control codes (p.123) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting

(TUNER FRQ STEP)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ON

REMOTESENSOR

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ID1

REMOTECONAMP

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz

steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9 (default)

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

NTSC

TVFORMAT

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 121

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.108) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

YES (default)

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

YES

MONITORCHECK

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 122

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.128).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

USB

FIRMUPDATE

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PARTY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

x.xx

VERSION

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 123

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other

ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the

registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register

the codes again.

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection

keys (p.124). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.125).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.

If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z Turns on/off the TV.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 124

Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.125).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find the remote control code for your playback

device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press the input selection key.

For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for

the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Configuring scene assignments” (p.51).

■ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in

orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For

example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER

and the external device after pressing SOURCE.

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected

song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.123).

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

REE

PTI

MUTE

RAM

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

CODE SET

DISPLAY

SOURCE z

SOURCE

RECEIVER

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

Menu operation keys

External device

operation keys

Input selection keys

External device

operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 125

Programming from other remote controls

(learning)

(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals

from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control

operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your

playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work

after you register the remote control code, use the learning function

to assign a function to each key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys depending on the

type of your device.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is

connected).

For TV: press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.

Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls

at each other.

Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.

a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to

assign a function.

For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,

external device operation keys

For TV: TV operation keys

b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is

learned.

Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.

Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are

learned.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks once.

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

USB NET

Remote control of external device

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart

Note

• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external

receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or

numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If

you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following

steps.

a Press CODE SET.

b Press RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

MUTE

RAM

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE z

SOURCE

TV operation keys

Menu operation keys

External device

operation keys

External device

operation keys

Numeric keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 126

Clearing functions learned from other

remote controls

(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

■ Clearing the assignment for each key

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.

Press the key that you want to reset.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.

Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are

cleared.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks once.

■ Clearing the assignments for each input

source

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.

Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

EIVE

R. DE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE

Numeric keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 127

Resetting remote control codes

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input

selection key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press the input selection key.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

To reset the remote control to factory default settings

a Press CODE SET.

b Press RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

CODE SET

RECEIVER

SOURCE

Numeric keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 128

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.122).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.118). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the

wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.122).

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

PHONO MULTI

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

SUR. DECODE

USB NET

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

CODE SET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

PHONO MULT

MAIN

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

SOU

EIVE

V-A

R. DE

ENTER

Cursor keys

APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 129

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.103).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.107). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 (p.112).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.107). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 (p.112).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.89).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.114) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.116).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.120).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu

to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when

this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 130

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.19).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.116).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.119).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.19).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.117).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 131

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120).

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights

up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.123). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be

controlled using the remote control.

A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to

V-AUX.

Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.127).

The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.

The remote control does not learn new functions.

(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external

device are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.125).

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not

compatible with the remote control.

Learning is impossible in this case.

Memory capacity is full.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions

(p.126).

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 132

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.107).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.106).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.103).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.105).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.89).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.105).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”

(p.104).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.109).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 133

Video

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.109).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.109). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.117).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI

audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due

to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.82).

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.121).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.143).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26 to 29).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 134

FM/AM radio

The video is interrupted.

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you

are using (p.49).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.82).

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

(U.S.A. model only)

Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.90).

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.91).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.58).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.58).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.

model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.59).

The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.

(U.S.A. model only)

The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.90).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 135

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.110). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.110).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.72).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.111).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.72).

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.111).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.122).

APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 136

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.72).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.65).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

MHL Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile

device.

Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.120).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.72). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 137

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 138

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

MHL

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission

that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL

complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C

signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color

reproduction than the composite video signal system.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 139

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D

sound field in your room.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 140

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

S VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

m: Available

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

SVIDEO

out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmm m

1080i mmmm m

1080p m

S VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmm m

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

S VIDEO outS VIDEO in

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 141

Multi-zone output

■ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected

■ Video output

m: Available

*3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.31).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.50)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.124)

Using the unit’s

internal amplifier (p.23)

Using an external amplifier (p.81)

Zone2 Out

EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

USB (including iPod) mm

Network sources mm

TUNER mm

Zone2 Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)

jack (*4)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO

HDMI video m

Component video m

S-video m

Composite video m

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 142

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.109) in the “Setup”

menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and

“Standby Sync”).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 143

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 144

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

COAXIAL

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

(4 RADIO)

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

12V 0.1A

(U.S.A. model)

APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 145

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory

standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign

Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United

States and/or other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network

Windows

™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™

Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

Trademarks

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 146

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)

Component x 4 (AV 1–4)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)

* V-AUX: MHL input compatible

•Others

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R

, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)

- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)

- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)

• Digital Audio

Optical x 1 (AV OUT)

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

- Component x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)

* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

• DC OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

MHL

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)

Specifications

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 147

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R .............................................................110 W+110 W

Center............................................................................. 110 W

Surround L/R.......................................................110 W+110 W

Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R .............................................................120 W+120 W

Center............................................................................. 120 W

Surround L/R.......................................................120 W+120 W

Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch

Center ........................................................................135 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8



)

[China, Korea, Asia and General models]

Front L/R.....................................................................165 W/ch

Center.........................................................................165 W/ch

Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch

Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k

HEADPHONE OUT.............................................150 mV/100 

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ................................+0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .........................................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less

MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 )

............................................................................ 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]... 86 dB or more

[Other models]................................................... 81 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)

......................................................................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out)..................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

.................................................................60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz

Zone2

Bass Boost/Cut ............................ ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 148

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC

[Other models].................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 

S-video

Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]

..................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 

C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75 

Component

Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 

• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]..................... 72 dB/70 dB

HD [U.S.A. model] ...........................................................80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]........................ 0.3%/0.5%

HD [U.S.A. model] .......................................................... 0.03%

• Antenna Input ................................................75  unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model].................................................... 490 W/620 VA

[Canada model] ................................................. 400 W/510 VA

[Korea model] .................................................................390 W

[Other models] ................................................................490 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off

[General model] ..............................................0.35 W (Typical)

[Other models] ..................................................0.3 W (Typical)

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 4.5 W (Typical)

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)

..........................................................................4.5 W (Typical)

Network Standby On .........................................2.2 W (Typical)

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models] ...........................................1190 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

............................435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Weight ...........................................................15.1 kg (33.3 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 149

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 128

Lock icon (o) 116

Numerics

16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 108

2.1-channel system 17

2ch Stereo (sound program) 55

3.1-channel system 17

4K signal (video signal resolution) 143

5.1-channel system 17

5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103

5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21

5ch BI-AMP +SB

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103

5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22

7.1+2-channel system 16

7.1-channel system 16

7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103

7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22

7ch Stereo (sound program) 55

Access denied (error indication) 136

Access error (error indication) 136

Action Game (sound program) 54

Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 88

Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 107

Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 107

ADVANCED SETUP menu 119

Advanced speaker configuration 20

Adventure (sound program) 54

AirPlay 77

Album (HD Radio™) 60

AM antenna connection 36

AM radio listening 58

Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 109

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26

ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109

Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 60

Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 108

Audio Decoder (front display information) 86

Audio device connection 33

Audio file format (PC/NAS) 72

Audio file format (USB storage device) 69

AUDIO jack 25

Audio Mode (Option menu) 90

Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 109

Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 60

Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26

Audio Select (Option menu) 90

Audio Signal (Information menu) 118

Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 116

Auto Preset (FM radio) 64

Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 62

Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41

Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 106

Automatic speaker setting optimization 41

Automatic station preset (FM radio) 64

Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 62

AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 116

AV OUT jack 11

Backup/recovery of the settings 121

Banana plug 19

Basic playback operation 49

Basic speaker configuration 16

Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 88

Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 105

Bi-amp speaker connection 23

Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Bitstream 143

CAT-5 cable 37

Category (HD Radio™) 60

Cellar Club (sound program) 55

Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 104

Center Image (Sound Program menu) 99

Center Width (Sound Program menu) 99

Chamber (sound program) 55

Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Check SP Wires (error indication) 136

Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 47

CINEMA DSP 3D 53

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 88

CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 55

Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 64

Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 62

Clearing (remote control) 126

Clock Time (Radio Data System) 62

COAXIAL jack 25

Component video cable 25

Component video connection (video device) 32

COMPONENT VIDEO jack 25

Composite video connection (video device) 33

Compressed Music Enhancer 57

Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 103

Crossover frequency setting 105

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41

DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 115

DC OUT jack 11

Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 98

Decoder Mode (Input menu) 93

Decoder Off (front display information) 86

Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 110

Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 118

Default setting restoration 121

Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 106

Detail (Load, Scene menu) 96

Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 95

Index

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 150

DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 110

Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 89

Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 89

Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 89

Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 89

Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 89

Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 89

Dialogue normalization level 118

Digital coaxial cable 25

Digital Media Controller (DMC) 94

Digital optical cable 25

Dimension (Sound Program menu) 99

Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 114

Direct (Sound Program menu) 98

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 137

DISPLAY key 13

Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 114

Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 105

Distance (YPAO measurement result) 45

DLNA 72

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 94

DMC Control (Input menu) 94

DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 110

DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 118

Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 89

Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 89

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 56

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 89

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 56

Drama (sound program) 54

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 137

DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 98

DSP Program (front display information) 86

DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 56

DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 56

DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 89

Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 107

ECO (Setup menu) 116

ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 117

Enhancer (Option menu) 90

ENHANCER (sound mode) 57

ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 54

Error indication (front display) 136

EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 89

EXTD Surround (Option menu) 89

Extended Surround (Option menu) 89

External device control (remote control) 123

External device operation key (remote control) 13

External power amplifier 24

, 81

Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 105

Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 111

FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 122

Firmware update 122

Firmware update (network) 122

, 128

Firmware update (USB) 122

Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 118

Firmware version check 122

FM antenna connection 36

FM Mode (Option menu) 91

FM radio listening 58

FM/AM radio tuning 58

Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Frequency (FM/AM radio) 58

Frequency step setting 58

, 120

Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 103

Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 98

Front display (part names and functions) 10

Front display brightness 114

Front display information 86

Front panel (part names and functions) 8

Front panel door (front panel) 8

Front panel jack connection 34

Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 104

Function (Setup menu) 114

GND terminal 34

Ground lead 34

Hall in Munich (sound program) 55

Hall in Vienna (sound program) 55

HD Radio™ information 60

HD Radio™ tuning 60

HDMI (Setup menu) 109

HDMI cable 25

HDMI connection (video device) 31

HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 109

HDMI jack 25

HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 118

HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 110

HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 110

HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113

HDMI output selection 49

HDMI signal compatibility 143

Headphones 53

Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 98

High definition audio 143

High speed HDMI cable 25

Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 61

In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 89

Indicator (part names and functions) 10

INFO key 9

, 13

Information display (front display) 10

Information menu 117

Information switching (front display) 86

Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98

Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 107

Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112

INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 151

Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 114

Input jack assignment 114

Input menu 92

Input selection key (remote control) 13

Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 89

Internal Error (error indication) 136

Internal Error (YPAO error message) 47

Internet radio listening 75

IP Address (Network, Information menu) 118

IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 110

iPod charge 65

iPod connection 65

iPod content playback 66

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 77

iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 77

Language (Setup menu) 117

Learning (remote control) 125

Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 98

Level (Sound Program menu) 98

Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 105

Level (YPAO measurement result) 45

Level Error (YPAO warning message) 48

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 138

Lipsync 138

Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 106

LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 55

Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98

Load (Scene menu) 95

Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 138

MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 111

MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 118

MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 111

Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 112

Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 103

Manual speaker configuration 103

Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 59

Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 107

Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112

Measurement result (YPAO) 45

Media sharing setup 72

Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 116

Menu language selection 40

Menu operation key (front panel) 9

Menu operation key (remote control) 13

MHL cable 25

MHL connection 35

MHL jack 25

MHL Overloaded (error indication) 136

MHL-compatible mobile device 35

MODE key 13

Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 98

Monaural reception (FM radio) 58

Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 58

Monitor check 121

MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121

Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113

Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113

Mono Movie (sound program) 54

MOVIE (sound program category) 54

MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 54

MULTI CH INPUT jack 12

Multi measurement (YPAO) 44

Multi Zone (Information menu) 118

Multi Zone (Setup menu) 112

Multi-channel analog connection 38

Multiple room playback 79

Multi-zone 79

Multi-zone output 141

MUSIC (sound program category) 55

Music Video (sound program) 54

MUTE key 13

Muting 49

NAS (Network Attached Storage) 37

NAS connection 37

NAS content playback 72

Network (Information menu) 118

Network (Setup menu) 110

Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37

Network cable 37

Network connection 37

Network information 118

Network Name (Network, Information menu) 118

Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 111

Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 111

No content (error indication) 136

No device (error indication) 136

No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 47

No Front SP (YPAO error message) 47

No MIC (YPAO error message) 47

No Signal (YPAO error message) 47

No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 47

Noisy (YPAO error message) 47

Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45

NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120

Numeric key (remote control) 13

ON SCREEN key 13

OPTICAL jack 25

OPTION key 13

Option menu 87

Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 48

Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 48

PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120

Panorama (Sound Program menu) 99

Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 105

PARTY key 13

Party mode 85

Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113

PC connection 37

PC content playback 72

PHONES jack 9

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 152

PHONO jack 11

Playback device connection 31

Playback device operation (remote control) 124

Please wait (error indication) 136

Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 103

Power cable connection 39

Power management 116

Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 115

PRE OUT jack 12

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 59

Program Service (Radio Data System) 62

Program Type (Radio Data System) 62

Pure Direct 57

PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 57

Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 107

Q factor 106

Radio Data System (FM radio) 62

Radio Data System information 62

Radio Data System tuning 62

Radio Text (Radio Data System) 62

Rear panel (part names and functions) 11

Recording device connection 37

RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121

RemID Mismatch (error indication) 136

REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120

Remote connection 83

Remote control (part names and functions) 13

Remote control code registration

(playback device) 124

Remote control code registration (TV) 123

Remote Control Code Search 123

, 124

Remote control ID setting 120

Remote control ID setting (remote control) 120

Remote control sensor 8

Remote control sensor setting 120

Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 13

Remote ID (System, Information menu) 118

REMOTE IN jack 11

Remote Off (error indication) 136

REMOTE OUT jack 11

REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120

Rename (input name) 93

Rename (network name) 111

Rename (scene name) 96

Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 93

Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 96

Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 68

Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 74

Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 71

Reset (remote control) 127

Reset (Scene menu) 96

Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 108

Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 98

Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 98

Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 98

Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45

Roleplaying Game (sound program) 54

Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98

Router connection 37

S VIDEO jack 25

Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118

Save (Scene menu) 95

SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 47

Scene configuration 51

SCENE function 50

SCENE link playback 51

Scene menu 94

Sci-Fi (sound program) 54

Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 103

Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 103

Setup menu 100

Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 114

Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 68

Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 74

Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 71

Signal information 118

SILENT CINEMA 53

Simple play (iPod) 67

Single measurement (YPAO) 43

Size (YPAO measurement result) 45

SLEEP key 13

Sleep timer 13

Sleep timer (Zone2) 85

Sound (Setup menu) 106

Sound field effect 53

Sound mode selection 52

Sound program 54

, 55

Sound Program menu 97

Speaker (Setup menu) 103

Speaker cable connection 19

Speaker connection 15

SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 119

Speaker impedance 15

Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 118

Speaker impedance setting 18

, 119

Speaker indicator (front display) 10

Speaker placement 16

Spectacle (sound program) 54

Sports (sound program) 54

Standard (sound program) 54

Standby indicator (front panel) 8

Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109

Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 110

Station Info (HD Radio™) 60

Station preset (FM/AM radio) 59

Status (Network, Information menu) 118

STEREO (sound program subcategory) 55

Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 25

Stereo reception (FM radio) 58

Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 58

STP network cable 37

STRAIGHT (sound mode) 56

Straight decode 56

Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 110

Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 118

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 153

Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 104

Subwoofer connection 19

Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 90

SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 56

Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 104

Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 104

Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98

Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98

Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98

Surround decoder 56

Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98

Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98

Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98

S-video cable 25

S-video connection (video device) 32

SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 90

System (Information menu) 118

System ID (System, Information menu) 118

Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 115

Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 106

The Bottom Line (sound program) 55

The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 55

Tone Control (Option menu) 88

TONE/BALANCE key 9

TP (Traffic Program) 63

Traffic information (Radio Data System) 63

Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 63

Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 88

Trigger function 38

Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 115

TRIGGER OUT jack 11

Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 115

Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 115

Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 118

TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120

Turntable connection 34

TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109

TV connection 26

TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 26

TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 28

TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29

TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30

TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120

TV Format (System, Information menu) 118

TV operation (remote control) 123

TV operation key (remote control) 13

Unable to play (error indication) 136

USB jack 9

USB mass storage class device 69

USB Overloaded (error indication) 136

USB storage device connection 69

USB storage device content playback 69

User Cancel (YPAO error message) 47

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 122

Version error (error indication) 136

Video (Setup menu) 108

VIDEO AUX jack 9

Video device connection 31

VIDEO jack 25

Video Mode (Option menu) 90

Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 108

Video Out (Input menu) 93

Video pin cable 25

Video Signal (Information menu) 118

Video signal flow 140

Video signal type setting 120

Virtual CINEMA DSP 53

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7

Voltage selection 39

VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11

Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112

Volume Interlock (Input menu) 93

Volume Trim (Option menu) 89

VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7

Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 114

Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 45

Yamaha Parametric room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer 41

YPAO error message 47

YPAO MIC jack 9

YPAO microphone 41

YPAO warning message 48

Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 112

Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113

Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113

Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 112

Zone2 speaker connection 23

, 80

Transcripción de documentos

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 FEATURES 6 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 41 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PREPARATIONS 14 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 PLAYBACK 49 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 En 2 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 117 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 119 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 CONFIGURATIONS 92 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 En 3 APPENDIX 129 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  AM antenna  FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.  YPAO microphone  Power cable • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.65 • USB . p.69 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.72 • Internet radio . p.75 • AirPlay . p.77 Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.41 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.53 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.57 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio • Bi-amp connections, channel expansion (with external power-amp) and multi-zone configurations to enhance your system . p.20 Audio USB device HDMI Control 3D and 4K signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV Control Audio/Video (via HDMI/MHL) Smartphone/Tablet AV receiver (the unit) Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.50 TV remote control . p.141 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.31) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.53) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting front presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.90). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.106). BD/DVD player I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.109). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. Set-top box Game console Camcorder I want to use the supplied remote control to operate external devices… TV Register the remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.123). ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio Video from external device ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android device By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58) Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40). The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. I want to update the firmware... ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.57) When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.122). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.128). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.92) You can navigate through different types of content (such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. • SCENE settings (p.95) ❑ Low power consumption • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.118) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption (p.117). • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.98) • Various function settings (p.101) • System settings (p.119) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT VOLUME INPUT 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.109) • Standby Through is enabled (p.110) • Network Standby is enabled (p.111) • An iPod is being charged (p.65) 7 7 Front panel door For protecting controls and jacks (p.9). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 8 Opening the front panel door • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) 3 Front display Displays information (p.10). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.57). 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 ON SCREEN AB C OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 K INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM IJ ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 5V M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.87). B DISPLAY key 2.1A VIDEO N O Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.88). Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 (p.85). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.56). AUDIO R OPTICAL HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A P E PROGRAM keys J FM and AM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.52). F SCENE keys G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL Switch between FM and AM (p.58). K PRESET keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.50). Displays status information on the TV (p.86). C TONE/BALANCE key L Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.84). Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.84). H INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.86). I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.59). Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.59). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.58). M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.69) or an iPod (p.65). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. P VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.34, 35) or a smartphone (p.35). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 Front display (indicators) 1 2 34 6 5 HD STEREO TUNED ZONE IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP A PL L C R PR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR B 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. HD (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station signal. 3 ZONE2 Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.84). 9 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PARTY 3 0 8 7 B 6 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.86). 7 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 8 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 9 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.88) is working. 0 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57) is working. C C Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker Z Front presence speaker (L) X Front presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer A CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.53) is working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) is activated. B Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. 4 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 5 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.85) FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 Rear panel 1 2 3 4 56 7 DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 89 2 ARC AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV 1 B C AV 2 AV 3 Y PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C AV 5 AV 6 TRIGGER OUT MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR GND 1 REMOTE IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (U.S.A. model) AV 7 PR A AUDIO 1 E RS-232C AV 4 AV 1 L D (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT A HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 PHONO : AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 0.1A 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.33). 2 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 3 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.37). 4 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.31). 5 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.37). 6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (composite video/S-video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.81). 7 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.82). 9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.32). 0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.31). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. B REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.83). C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.38). D RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. E VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.39). A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.81). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C TRIGGER OUT PR AV 1 A Y GND 1 REMOTE MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (U.S.A. model) RS-232C AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 0.1A 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK CENTER L R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE F G F ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36). G AUDIO 1–4 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.33). H MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel output and inputting audio signals (p.38). H I J K L * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. J PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or to an external power amplifier (p.24). K SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.15). L AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39). I ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.81). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 SOURCE z key 2 RECEIVER SOURCE Turns on/off an external device. SOURCE key AV 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.124). This key lights up in green after pressed. RECEIVER key AUDIO Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.124). This key lights up in orange after pressed. RECEIVER z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. TUNER 4 5 MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 9 B C D E G H I J K DISPLAY L BAND MODE TUNING PRESET Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) TUNER FM/AM radio 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.50). 6 PROGRAM keys SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 Select a sound program (p.52). 7 External device operation keys ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Select menus for external devices (p.124). 5 6 9 0 3 7 8 ON SCREEN key 4 Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 8 9 Menu operation keys MEMORY 10 ENT TV F 3 Input selection keys Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.84). ENTER RETURN : A HDMI OUT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET M Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.67). (U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program (p.60). A Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.58). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is selected (p.124). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.52). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.86). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.59). F TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.123). G HDMI OUT key Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.49). H PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.85). I VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. J MUTE key Mutes the audio output. K OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.87). L DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.86). M CODE SET key Registers remote control codes of external devices on the remote control (p.123). • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.123). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Connecting speakers (p.15) Basic speaker configuration (p.16) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit. Advanced speaker configuration (p.20) Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance the system. 2 Connecting a TV (p.26) Connect a TV to the unit. 3 Connecting playback devices (p.31) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 5 Connecting to a network (p.37) Connect the unit to a network. 6 Connecting other devices (p.37) Connect external devices such as recording devices. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.39) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.40) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.41) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Connecting speakers The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20). Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Front (L) 1 Function Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 E Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 1 9 Produce surround back right/left channel sounds. Surround back (R) R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 3 9 Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room. 4 5 10°~30° 10°~30° 6 • We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.53). 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. ❑ 7.1+2-channel system (using both surround back and front presence speakers) ❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. ❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) • The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.53). This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 5.1-channel system ❑ 2.1-channel system This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ Front 5.1-channel system • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. E R 1 9 2 3 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Setting the speaker impedance ■ Connecting speakers Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Speakers to be connected STRAIGHT Room 3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4 5 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Abbr. 7+2 7 5 2 Front (L) 1 ● ● ● ● Front (R) 2 ● ● ● ● Center 3 ● ● ● Surround (L) 4 ● ● *3 Surround (R) 5 ● ● *3 Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 Front presence (L) E ● *2 *4 Front presence (R) R ● *2 *4 Power Amp Assign (p.103) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. Main zone Basic (default) If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence speakers (*2). If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. • To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an external power amplifier” (p.24). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) ❑ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. + – + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Loosen the speaker terminal. Connection diagram Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit. U C U ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. 1 d Tighten the terminal. 2 The unit (rear) ROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP L + (red) + b FR c ON T - a d SINGLE – (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. Q W 1 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. a 2 Banana plug 9 3 9 4 5 + FR ON T b ❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 6 7 Audio pin cable PRE OUT (SING LE) 1 2 SURR UND SUR. BA CK SUBW OOFE R CENT ER CENT ER FRO NT • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Advanced speaker configuration In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system. Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds Bi-amp connection Combining with an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to build an extended system Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room Power-amp channel expansion (Example) Multi-zone configuration (Example) (Example) External power amplifier Bi-amp connection Zone2 Main zone PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Available speaker configurations ❑ 5ch BI-AMP Main zone Output channel (max) Bi-amp 5  7  7 Bi-amp External power amplifier (required) Multi-zone Surround back +1 (Zone2) Power Amp Assign (p.103) Page 5ch BI-AMP 21 5ch BI-AMP +SB 22 7ch +1ZONE 22 1 2 3 9 4 9 5 • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the “Setup” menu. Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 67 (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE Bi-amp 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 1 5 6 7 2 9 3 4 5 6 2 7 Zone2 Main zone via external amp Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.84), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ■ Connecting Zone2 speakers When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals. When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals. To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP R L SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK 1 1 9 2 2 FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP L 3 FL 9 FR 9 4 3 4 R SINGLE SINGLE 9 CENTER L 5 6 7 Zone2 5 Main zone • You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.81). • The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. (Example) Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks RS-232C 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 Main input jack TRIGGER OUT MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Caution 1 REMOTE IN OUT • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. (SINGLE) 0.1A 1 L L 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER R SPEAKERS SURROUND BACK L CENTER – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. – When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the pre-main amplifier. MAIN IN PR 2 12V PRE OUT R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP FRONT R AC IN L Amplifier with volume control bypass (such as A-S2000) SUR SINGLE The unit (rear) The unit (rear) HDMI 3 C RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 TRIGGER OUT PR Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE IN OUT 2 D 12V ZONE OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 0.1A 1 2 ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L SINGLE 1 23 4 1 FRONT jacks Output front channel sounds. 2 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. 3 SUR. BACK jacks About external power amplifiers We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions. • With unbalanced inputs • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit) • Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 ) Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side). 4 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable EN PON COM Component video cable AV 1 A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ❑ S VIDEO jack • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos. Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video cable. ❑ HDMI/MHL jack Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable S-video cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL cable. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). MHL cable ❑ VIDEO jacks Stereo pin cable Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. AV 1 Video pin cable • The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.35). PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 25 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.109) in the “Setup” menu. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. ■ Connection Method 1 (p.26) • Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC. HDMI OUT 1 jack No HDMI OUT 1 Does your TV support HDMI Control? Yes ■ Connection Method 2 (p.28) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 2 ARC The unit (rear) (ZONE OUT) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 (1 BD/D HDMI input (ARC-compatible) PB AV 1 HDMI A No GND ARC AV 2 B Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? Yes AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 HDMI AUDIO 4 R ■ Connection Method 3 (p.29) No ■ Connection Method 4 (p.30) 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio 4 OPTICAL FRONT (4 RADIO) AM TV About HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.141). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.140). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN RETURN On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER e Check the following. DISPLAY d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28). e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. g Use the cursor keys to select “On”. h Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.109) in the “Setup” menu. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 1 jack a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI OUT 1 DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 2 ARC The unit (rear) (ZONE OUT) HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 b Press ON SCREEN. HDMI AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 HDMI input (1 BD/D PB ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER AV 1 HDMI A GND ENTER AV 2 B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 HDMI AUDIO 4 RETURN R AUDIO 1 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio 4 OPTICAL (2 TV) DISPLAY AUDIO FRONT c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. L L L R R (4 RADIO) R AM TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.140). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31). e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 28 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). HDMI OUT 1 jack b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. HDMI OUT c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. 1 DC OUT 5V 0.5A e Check the following. (ZONE OUT) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. NETWORK 2 ARC The unit (rear) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 HDMI input (1 BD/D PB AV 1 HDMI A GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 HDMI AUDIO 4 R f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. AUDIO 1 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL ANTENNA This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. 75Ω FM HD Radio 4 OPTICAL (2 TV) AUDIO FRONT L L L R R (4 RADIO) R AM TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.140). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV. • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 29 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) ❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable) Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following connections. If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT The unit (rear) Video input (S-video) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 (ZONE OUT) ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) S VIDEO MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y S AV 1 A S GND AV 2 • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) R • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL L 6 COAXIAL L L R R R ANTENNA • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). 75Ω FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM TV 5 OPTICAL ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) OPTICAL O MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Y The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks PR Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) PB HDMI HDMI OUT 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 A (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT AV 1 2 ARC Y PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) Y PR AV 1 A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR Video input (component video) REM IN AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) COMPONENT VIDEO 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND PR SUR. BACK Y PB MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT The unit (rear) PR NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L 2 ARC CE Video input (S-video) V DC OUT 5V 0.5A (ZONE OUT) PB PHONO Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) VIDEO MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 A V GND AV 2 AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) B AUDIO 1 L (2 TV) L L SINGLE AUDIO 2 AUDIO 4 (2 TV) 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL L 6 COAXIAL R R AUDIO AUDIO 1 R L AUDIO 3 L L R R R R TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM TV 5 OPTICAL O OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 30 1 2 TV connection 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.49). HDMI OUT 2 jack DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 2 ARC HDMI AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) • Connecting a USB storage device (p.69) Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 2 ARC AV 1 TV (ZONE OUT) 1 PHONO The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.65) HDMI OUT 1 The unit (rear) 3 Connecting playback devices (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 (1 BD/D PB AV 1 A GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 HDMI R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL HDMI input FRONT HDMI ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. (4 RADIO) AM • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. TV (already connected) Projector • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C , D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.82). • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.90) in the “Option” menu. ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks The unit (rear) HDMI 2 OUT) Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C TRIG OU PR Y MULTI CH INPUT REMOTE IN OUT D AV 4 AUDIO 4 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 12V ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK HDMI output HDMI 1 HDMI 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER HDMI CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRONT L SINGLE Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Component video connection ■ S-video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Input jacks on the unit Audio Component video Video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks S-video The unit (rear) PB PR Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) DC OUT 5V 0.5A Y Audio PR PHONO NETWORK AV 1 AV 2 AV 1–4 (S VIDEO) jacks ( 3 NET ) AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT Video output (S-video) PB GND DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 (ZONE OUT) ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) Y HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 S (1 BD/DVD) L PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C PR R AV 1 A Video output (component video) GND AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT R PR 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK R SUBWOOFER SURROUND 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL S 4 OPTICAL S VIDEO ZONE CENTER Y PB PR ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM ZONE 2 PB L C C Y ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio COAXIAL (4 RADIO) AM O C C L COAXIAL O Video device L L R R OPTICAL O L L L R R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Video device O Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Composite video connection Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Composite video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.90) in the “Option” menu. The unit (rear) DC OUT 5V 0.5A PHONO NETWORK AV 1 AV 2 AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO) Turntable (PHONO) PHONO ( 3 NET ) AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT Video output (composite video) V GND L VIDEO R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio V 4 OPTICAL (4 RADIO) AM C C COAXIAL O Video device O L L L R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 33 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel PHONO jacks PHONO Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Audio output (PHONO) Ground lead GND Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. The unit (rear) PHONO L L DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK L ( 3 NET ) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT AV 1 2 ARC (1 BD/ (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT R ❑ HDMI connection L HDMI OUT 1 R PHONO Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.65) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.69). GND Y R PB Turntable R AV 1 A Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM AUDIO 4 FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN R ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SILENT CINEMA 5V ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A (4 RADIO) AM HDMI C C COAXIAL O The unit (front) Audio device O L L L R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Game console If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.93) in the “Input” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 34 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ MHL connection ❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM ZONE 2 VIDEO AUX PHONES MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY TUNING YPAO MIC ENTER SILENT CINEMA ZONE 2 RETURN AM ENTER RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A L The unit (front) MHL The unit (front) MHL output MHL Game console Mobile device If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. Camcorder • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29). • You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device. If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device. • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack. • If “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 35 1 2 3 4 FM/AM antenna connections 5 6 7 8 9 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. • The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase. FM antenna AM antenna DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C PR AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Connecting the AM antenna AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SI SURROUND SUR Hold down R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT Insert Release SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE The unit (rear) • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 36 1 2 3 4 5 Network connections 6 Other connections 7 8 9 5 Connecting to a network 6 Connecting other devices Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Internet Connecting recording devices You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output video/audio signals selected as the input. Network Attached Storage (NAS) • The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. WAN • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. PC LAN AV OUT jacks Modem Video/audio input VIDEO AV OUT The unit (rear) V DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC Router PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) V S VIDEO (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT S Y S AV 1 A Network cable GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L Mobile device (such as iPhone) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO AUDIO 4 HDMI Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 R L L R R L (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO Y AV 3 PR PB C 1 COAXIAL PR 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL AV 1 A MO 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL Y GND R Video/audio recording device AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ANTENNA ZONE OUT CENTER 75Ω FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM OPTICAL R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK R The unit (rear) ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SUBWOOFER SURROUND ZONE 2 O L O R (4 RADIO) AM • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.110). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 Other connections 7 8 9 Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks. The unit (rear) ORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC AV 3 AV 4 (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C P AV 1 A The unit (rear) AV 2 TRIGGER OUT B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT CENTER RS-232C AV 6 AV 7 1 TRIGGER OUT 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER Radio 1 REMOTE R SURROUND OUT L MULTI CH INPUT ENNA ZON CENTER (4 RADIO) AM 2 2 Channel output (Center) 12V LE) 0.1A 12V 0.1A 1 System connection input 2 CK (Subwoofer) FRONT MULTI CH INPUT jacks SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L SUBWOOFER L (Surround back) R L (Surround) Device with analog multi-channel output Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection R L (Front) • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu. R If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video Out” (p.93) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection. • Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker configuration. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not available. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Power cable connection 8 9 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR RS-232C AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 220V240V TRIGGER OUT 1 REMOTE OUT PR IN OUT 110V120V 2 12V PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 0.1A 1 2 CK L SUBWOOFER CENTER CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L SINGLE After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) RS-232C AV 6 AV 7 TRIGGER OUT 1 REMOTE OUT 2 12V LE) 0.1A 1 2 CK SUBWOOFER CENTER CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L To an AC wall outlet PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Language setting 9 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. OPTION Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 According to your speaker configuration, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the “Setup” menu. For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic” (default). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 5 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set to the appropriate setting. • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. • Please note the following when using YPAO. – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. ENTER RETURN Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. YPAO MIC jack The unit (front) YPAO MIC DISPLAY – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. BAND – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. MODE TUNING – Do not connect headphones. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 5 6 9 0 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 1 2 ENT Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 1 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT 9 4 2 3 YPAO 5 microphone 9 Ear height MIN MAX MIN MAX Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup The following screen appears on the TV. RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. AUDIO Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 6 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY a If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). e bac a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) BAND MODE TUNING d PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT b c a e d TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET Settings Yes No (default) Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). c a b d This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.44) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.43) • If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO Measuring at one listening position (single measure) 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. 3 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION The adjusted speaker settings are applied. ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 4 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 4 Caution 8 MEMORY 10 • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.45). PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 3 When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. AUDIO When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. 1 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.45). • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. BAND MODE TUNING The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup 6 RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. 2 This completes optimization of the speaker settings. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the correct polarity (+/-). Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. You can check the YPAO measurement results. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker 1 Level Output level adjustment for each speaker AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Checking the measurement results VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Use the cursor keys to select an item. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Cursor keys ENTER RETURN After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. • A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box. • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. 3 The following screen appears. PRESET To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT 1 TV 2 INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 3 1 Measurement result items 2 Measurement result details 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. AUDIO TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.100). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10: Internal Error Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.45) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.45) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 48 PLAYBACK RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET AUDIO Input selection keys TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Basic playback procedure 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. HDMI OUT HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58) BAND MODE TUNING • Playing back iPod music (p.65) PRESET • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.69) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.72) MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT • Listening to Internet radio (p.75) TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.77) TV CH CODE SET 4 OUT 1+2 Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. OUT 2 Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.50). • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113)), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.88). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 49 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN HDMI Output DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO) Input (p.49) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Audio Select (p.90) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.49) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 Sound Program (p.52) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.107) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.57) Off On On On Input OPTION ENTER 1 (BD/DVD) Mode PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.94). TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 50 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE Configuring scene assignments AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. Input selection keys TUNER MAIN 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.96) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround Video Video Mode Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments HD 3 3 SCENE1 SETComplete MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 7 8 MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.124) to register it. • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.95) in the “Scene” menu. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 51 Selecting the sound mode RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV TV VOL c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.97). • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.55). • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.56) is automatically selected. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.117). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.56). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. INPUT MUTE b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. • Press MUSIC repeatedly. ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND MOVIE ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback DISPLAY MODE TUNING a Press ON SCREEN. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.54). OPTION ENTER On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection TV CH CODE SET This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.56). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.57). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.57). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 52 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “CINEMA DSP n” lights up Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.88) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 53 ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 54 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 55 Enjoying unprocessed playback RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.137). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. HD 3 Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) SUR.DECODE ProLogic bPro Logic ENTER RETURN DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP DISPLAY HD 3 STRAIGHT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 4 bPLII Music INPUT TV VOL • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.89) in the “Option” menu to a setting other than “Off”. bPLIIx Game Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music. ENT TV MUTE SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR 8 MEMORY 10 bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE bPLIIx Movie MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC TV CH CODE SET • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 56 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AUDIO 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press PURE DIRECT. HD TOP MENU PUREDIRECT 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs RETURN DISPLAY – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus BAND – Using the multi-zone function MODE TUNING PRESET SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 4 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD EnhancerOn MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR 3 “ENHANCER” lights up ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. 8 MEMORY 10 1 – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. – Output from the AV OUT jacks SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) ENT TV • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.90) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57 Listening to FM/AM radio RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 (Asia and General models only) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO Set the unit to standby mode. MAIN ZONE z SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 STRAIGHT Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR 4 8 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys MEMORY 10 3 ENT TV “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • (U.S.A. model only) You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “Audio Mode” (p.90) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.) • (Except for U.S.A. model) You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.91) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 58 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.62, p.64). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Selecting a preset station Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.58) to tune into the desired radio station. Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 01:FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR OPTION • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. ENTER RETURN • (U.S.A. model only) To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.60) after tuning into the radio station. DISPLAY BAND • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE Numeric keys MEMORY 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.62, p.64). The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. TV CH CODE SET Preset number Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 02:Empty FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 59 RECEIVER SOURCE HD Radio™ tuning ■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program (U.S.A. model only) You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio Technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. AUDIO TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION RETURN BAND MODE TUNING Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience PRESET Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 5 6 3 4 7 8 MEMORY 9 These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre. INFO SLEEP 2 10 0 DOCK TAG HD HD2/3 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 FM88.9MHz3 WXYZ-FM MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information ENT Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the item switches. of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT 1 You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8) directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it). 1 DISPLAY MODE INFO Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio program. You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display. ENTER MOVIE 1 DOCK TAG HD TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio Info Category stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today?s FM and FM sounds like a CD. Numeric keys ENT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Item name About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET When tuning into an HD Radio station DOCK TAG HD HD1/3 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 FM88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM “HD” lights up FM88.9-1 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP Relative/total program number (when multiple programs are available) IN OUT 1 OUT 2 DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Absolute program number (when multiple programs are available) WXYZ-FM RhythmandBlu MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign) Category Station name (call sign), program category Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title Album Station name (call sign), album title DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit • The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys. • When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.90), you can tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only. • Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station or period of time. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 60 ■ Holding HD Radio™ information display RECEIVER SOURCE You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 When the desired HD Radio information is displayed, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold” (Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 8 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. • The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode or if another input source or another radio station is selected. 3 Menu TV CH Function Switches to FM/AM. AM Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Program (+/-) Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. Selects an audio program (when multiple audio programs are available). Memory Registers the selected station as presets. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. Direct Enters a frequency directly. You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 1 Submenu FM To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Manual Tuning 4 MEMORY 10 Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 5 Operation menu • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. OPTION Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received. 4 TUNED/STEREO indicators ■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV MODE MUTE The current information will remain displayed until “Hold/Unhold” is selected again. POP-UP/MENU Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 HD indicator VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 2 Radio station information CODE SET ❑ Playback screen 1 2 3 4 Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 5 1 HOLD indicator Flashes when the hold function (p.61) is enabled. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 61 ■ Browse screen RECEIVER SOURCE Radio Data System tuning AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 AUDIO 3 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Preset station list VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. 10 0 Auto Preset Automatically registers HD Radio (FM/AM) stations and FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. Utility ENT TV TV VOL DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 INPUT MUTE 2 PRESET MOVIE 9 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.64). 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING 1 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. TV CH CODE SET Info ProgramType MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1 (HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program, register it manually (p.59). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM98.50MHz CLASSICS MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 62 Operating the radio on the TV RECEIVER SOURCE • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU ■ Receiving traffic information automatically 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. • (U.S.A. model only) See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.61) to operate the radio on the TV. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. ■ Playback screen 3 1 2 4 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. 3 4 7 8 • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. TV CH CODE SET Finished DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Traffic information station (frequency) (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.62), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 Band icon (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM. • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63 Menu RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 Submenu Function FM AM (U.K. and Europe models only) Switches to FM/AM. Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET ■ Browse screen 1 AUDIO Manual Tuning TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 2 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu MODE TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PRESET MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 4 8 Utility MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64 Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.67). Made for. 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) ON SCREEN iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation) OPTION TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT PROGRAM ENTER iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation) RETURN DISPLAY PHONES YPAO MIC iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone SILENT iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad 5V 2.1A (as of April 2013) DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 65 Playback of iPod content RECEIVER SOURCE ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET AUDIO You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. USB TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. 1 5 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. HDMI OUT 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.68) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 4 Item number/total MODE TUNING • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY 10 ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 10 Pages Up CODE SET Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.67). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 66 ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 1 2 AUDIO 1 Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. 3 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.68) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. Operational remote control keys Function Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 3 Operation menu a Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC MODE ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 3 7 Menu 4 8 MEMORY 10 Submenu Function s Stops playback. f a Resumes playback from pause. g s Stops playback. h d Stops playback temporarily. j INPUT TV VOL Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. ENT TV MUTE External device operation keys d TV CH CODE SET Play Control Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f g h j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 67 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings RECEIVER SOURCE You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN BAND MODE MODE TUNING • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shuffle (Shuffle) MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 68 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 USB • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. DISPLAY • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. Playback of USB storage device contents • The unit does not support a USB hub. Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 1 ENTER RETURN • You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. The unit (front) 3 7 ON SCREEN 4 OPTION TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 8 PROGRAM ENTER MEMORY 10 ENT RETURN DISPLAY TV PHONES YPAO MIC INPUT TV VOL MUTE Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. SILENT TV CH CODE SET 5V 2.1A • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 69 2 RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUDIO 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status (such as play/pause). MUSIC Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Menu Moves to the previous/next page of the list. MEMORY 10 ENT TV Function 1 Page Up 1 Page Down INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 70 ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AUDIO 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Play Control Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) TV f INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET g Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status (such as play/pause). Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 71 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. NET TUNER MAIN Playback of PC music contents You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. AUDIO You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 7 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed 1 INPUT TV VOL MUTE Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. TV CH Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is installed on your PC. CODE SET 2 In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing and allow media to be shared with the device. • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 72 3 RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUDIO 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status (such as play/pause). Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Menu Moves to the previous/next page of the list. MEMORY 10 ENT TV Function 1 Page Up 1 Page Down INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 73 ■ Playback screen RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. 1 2 AUDIO 3 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu 10 ENT Play Control • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. 3 Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) TV f INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET g Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MEMORY • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status (such as play/pause). Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.94). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 74 Listening to Internet radio RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT NET TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu. Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • This service may be discontinued without notice. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 75 ■ Browse screen RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 Playback indicator 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ON SCREEN Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 Menu 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Play Control s Stops playback. Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up 3 4 7 8 Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT TV 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 76 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes PC 1 Router Starts playback on iTunes or iPod The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Playback starts iPod • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu. AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 (as of April 2013) On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 77 Menu RECEIVER SOURCE • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. AV 1 2 5 3 6 4 7 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.93) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Play Control 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU a Resumes playback from pause. d Stops playback temporarily. f Screen Off Skips forward/backward. Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Caution • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Function g SCENE 1 Submenu • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 iTunes (example of English version) 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. ■ Playback screen 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Check this box 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 78 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). ■ Enjoying videos/music in another room For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room. • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.141). Video (ZONE OUT) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Multi-zone configuration examples Study room (Zone2) ■ Enjoying music in another room Living room (main zone) Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.81 Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.81 You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room. Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) • Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog video/audio jacks of the unit. Study room (Zone2) Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.81 • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of the unit. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 79 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. Video/audio (HDMI) • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) ■ Connecting speakers to play back audio Living room (main zone) Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Connection TV: p.82 ❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier • Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of the unit. Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 80 ❑ Using an external amplifier Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. The unit (rear) HDMI HDMI OUT 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT UT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C PR Y MONITOR OUT/ZON PB ZONE OUT AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT CENTER L R 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. AV 1 A ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos FRONT SPEAKER R SURROUND L R SURROUND B ZONE 2 External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) ZONE OUT jacks (any of COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO, S VIDEO) Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 L 2 ARC R AV 1 Y AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 PB AV 5 A (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT UT Video input (any of component video, composite video, S-video) PR HDMI HDMI OUT PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 Y PB C COMPONENT VIDEO PR AV 1 A Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Y REM PR IN PB PR AV 2 AUDIO B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT PB ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) Y MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND V SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK VIDEO SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CE V S S VIDEO SINGLE Zone2 The unit (rear) S Main zone Zone2 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 81 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone2). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source – Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”) • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.31). • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. • On-screen operations are not available for Zone2. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack The unit (rear) (Example: using a TV) HDMI input OUT ETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC 2 HDMI 2 AV 3 AV 4 (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 A (1 BD/DVD) PB HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 HDMI PB AV 1 A AV 2 B AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) AXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK R ANTENNA HD Radio CENTER SUBWOOFE SURROUND (4 RADIO) AM Zone2 (Example: using an AV amplifier) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Main zone Zone2 To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 82 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each device before using (p.123). REMOTE REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT jacks The unit (rear) Infrared signal receiver HDMI V1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR REMOTE REMOTE IN OUT IN D AV 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT CENTER Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) PR PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK OUT 1 2 RONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER Remote control CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRO Zone2 SINGLE Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control Zone2 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 83 RECEIVER SOURCE RECEIVER z Controlling Zone2 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Input selection keys 1 2 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press RECEIVER z. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58) When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back iPod music (p.65) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.69) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.72) • Listening to Internet radio (p.75) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MEMORY 9 3 10 0 ENT Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.141). • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.77) • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the web control to control Zone2. For details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 84 ■ Other operations for Zone2 RECEIVER SOURCE The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Press VOLUME or MUTE. Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) Press SCENE. TUNER MAIN The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Adjusting the volume AUDIO ZONE 2 PARTY 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE MUTE Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Setting the sleep timer When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds ENTER a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. RETURN DISPLAY b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). • If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Press PARTY. • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOLUME OPTION ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB MEMORY 9 10 0 ENT Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. • When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the following functions are not available. – Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance – Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85 Viewing the current status RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 Switching information on the front display AUDIO PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. Input source group USB SERVER AirPlay SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Info AudioDecoder Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER DOCK TAG HD RETURN DISPLAY DISPLAY PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 BAND AV1 ProLogic MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MODE TUNING PRESET * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Information 1 MOVIE Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 Compressed Music Enhancer status INFO 3 7 4 8 • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. MEMORY 10 ENT TV Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–4 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (p.60). * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.62). Input source/ Party mode status Volume Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 86 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Page Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 88 Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 88 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 88 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Lvl) (Dialog Adjust) Dialogue Lift Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lift) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Input Trim (In.Trim) 89 89 Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 89 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 89 Subwoofer Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Trim (SW.Trim) 90 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 90 Video Mode (Video Mode) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 90 Audio Select (Audio Select) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 90 Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. 90 FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 91 PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 87 Item Function Page Hold/Unhold (Hold/Unhold) (U.S.A. model only) Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station. 61 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 63 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.68), USB storage device (p.71), or media server (p.74). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.68), USB storage device (p.71), or media server (p.74). — Default Bypass (Bypass) • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Adjusting with the front panel controls On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Settings ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) ■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) On Off Input level ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Settings On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 88 ■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust) ■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. ❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Default 0 Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie (bPLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music (bPLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) ❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.53) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Default 0 ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Ideal position Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 89 ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) ■ Audio Select (Audio Select) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57). Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Analog (Analog) Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. ■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode) Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. • This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM). ■ Video Mode (Video Mode) Settings Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu. Settings Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Direct (Direct) (default) Disables the video signal processing. Auto (Auto) (default) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good. Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds. • HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 90 ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings Stereo (Stereo) (default) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 91 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 93 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 93 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 93 Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 93 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 94 The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS Page ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 92 ■ Rename/Icon Select 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). ■ Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) Settings Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Input sources AirPlay Settings Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). ■ Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Input sources TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Off Does not output video. AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. Default USB: V-AUX Others: Off • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 93 ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.50) using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 94 4 ■ Load Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. ❑ Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings 5 6 Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 95 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 95 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 96 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 96 • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.51). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 95 ❑ Detail ■ Rename/Icon Select Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 2 3 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Check or uncheck Choices Input Input (p.49), Audio Select (p.90) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.49) Mode Sound Program (p.52), Pure Direct Mode (p.107), Enhancer (p.57) Sound Tone Control (p.88), Adaptive DRC (p.88) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.88), Dialogue Lift (p.89), Dialogue Level (p.89), Subwoofer Trim (p.90), Extended Surround (p.89) Video Video Mode (p.108) Volume Master Volume (p.49) Lipsync Lipsync (p.106), Delay (p.107) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.103), PEQ Select (p.105) Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.50) for the selected scene. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 96 4 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 3 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 97 Sound Program menu items Item Function Settings Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Function Settings Decode Type bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB) Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Sound program 2ch Stereo 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto (default), Off Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the right and left volume balance. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the front presence speakers. 0 to 10 (default: 5) Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The front presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off (default), On 7ch Stereo 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 98 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Item Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off (default), On Select “On” to wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 7 (default: 3) Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to +3 (default: 0) Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3) Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) Neo:6 Music CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 99 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 100 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 41 Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 103 Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 103 Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 103 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 103 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 104 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 104 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 104 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 104 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 104 Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 105 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 105 Auto Setup Speaker Page Configuration Manual Setup Lipsync Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 105 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 105 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 105 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 106 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 106 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 106 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 107 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 107 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 107 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 107 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 107 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 107 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 108 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 109 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 109 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 110 Sound Video HDMI CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 101 Menu Item Function Page IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 110 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 111 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 111 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 111 Network Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 112 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 112 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 112 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 112 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 113 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 113 Zone Rename Zone2 Set Multi Zone Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 113 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 113 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 113 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 113 Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 114 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 114 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 114 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 114 Input Assignment Display Set Function Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 115 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 115 DC OUT Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 115 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 116 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 116 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 117 Select an on-screen menu language. 117 Power Mode ECO Language CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 102 Speaker (Manual Setup) Configures the speaker settings manually. ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system. Settings ■ Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. Basic (default) Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16). 7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone2 speakers (p.22). 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) (p.21). 5ch BI-AMP +SB Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.22). When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. • Measurement results (Auto Setup) ■ Configuration • Power Amp Assign Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • Configuration • Distance • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). • Level ❑ Front • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1 (default), Pattern2 • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. ■ Setting Data Copy Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 103 ❑ Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Small x2 (default) Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Small (default) None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. ❑ Front Presence Settings ❑ Surround Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected. Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. ❑ Surround Back ❑ Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Use None Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Normal (default) Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Settings Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 104 ❑ Extra Bass ■ Level Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Settings Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. ❑ Bass Cross Over ■ Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 3 Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. Default 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 105 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Sound Configures the audio output settings. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB 5 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. ❑ Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. ❑ Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Settings Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 106 ❑ Adjustment ■ Initial Volume Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) ■ Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.57). Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Default 0 ms Settings Auto (default) Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. ■ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default +16.5 dB CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 107 Video ❑ Aspect Configures the video output settings. Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. ❑ Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.121) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108 ❑ ARC HDMI Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Configures the HDMI settings. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. ❑ Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.141). Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. ■ Audio Output • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AUDIO 1–4 Default AUDIO 1 Selects a device to output audio. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) is set to “Main”. ❑ Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109 ❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Network Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Configures the network settings. Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). ❑ DHCP Select whether to use a DHCP server. Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110 6 7 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. ❑ Filter Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ❑ MAC Address 1–10 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111 Multi Zone Configures the multi zone settings. ■ Zone2 Set Configures the Zone2 settings. ❑ Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume adjustments for Zone2. Settings ■ Main Zone Set Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.103) is set to “7ch +1ZONE. Configures the main zone setting. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ❑ Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. ❑ Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Off (default) Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112 ❑ Mono ❑ Zone Rename Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.112). Settings Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2. ❑ Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. ■ Procedure 1 2 3 ■ Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Main (default), Zone2 Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Settings Main (default), Zone2 • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.141). ■ Party Mode Set • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.85). Choice Target: Zone2 Settings • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113 Function 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. ❑ Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 ■ Procedure • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”. Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2” ❑ Short Message 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. ❑ Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings 2 Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER. Picture 1 (default), Picture 2, Picture 3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114 ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 ❑ Target Zone Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings ❑ Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Settings Power (default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Zone2 Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All (default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. ■ DC OUT Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings Configures the DC OUT jack setting. ❑ Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Manual Continuous (default) Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Main Zone Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is turned on. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.) Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115 ■ Memory Guard ECO Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116 ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. Off (default) Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. Language Select an on-screen menu language. Settings English (default) English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 117 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal IP Address IP address Displays information about the current audio signal. Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The speaker terminals from which signals are output DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address MAC address Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.111) Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack ■ System Displays the system information on the unit. • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.120) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.120) Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.119) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.120) System ID System ID number Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.128). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume for Zone2 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 118 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Item Function SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 119 REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 120 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 120 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 120 MAIN ZONE z TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 120 MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 121 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 121 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 121 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 122 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 122 Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Set the unit to standby mode. STRAIGHT PROGRAM 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Page Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 6  MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8  MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 119 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTESENSOR ON (Asia and General models only) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. Settings ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTECONAMP ID1 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1 (default), ID2 ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. 1 2 3 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL Press CODE SET on the remote control. Press RECEIVER. Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1. • The registered remote control codes (p.123) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 120 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 MONITORCHECK YES DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.108) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. Choices BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 121 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB Checking the firmware version (VERSION) SPIMP.- MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 VERSION x.xx MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.118) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.128). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 122 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE Controlling external devices with the remote control AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. • Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register the codes again. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM OPTION ENTER RETURN BAND MODE INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 3 4 ■ TV operations Registering the remote control code for a TV Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. 7 8 TV operation keys Numeric keys MEMORY 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE blinks twice. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Press TV z. • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) DISPLAY TUNING 3 4 If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. AUDIO TV CH CODE SET TV operation keys TV z CODE SET • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.124). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. TV CH Switch the channels of the TV. TV z Turns on/off the TV. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.125). 1 Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 123 RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT SOURCE z SOURCE RECEIVER AUDIO Input selection keys TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Registering the remote control codes for playback devices You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.125). POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION External device operation keys 1 ■ Playback device operations Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. • By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER and the external device after pressing SOURCE. SOURCE z Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. Turns on/off the playback device. Cursor keys Menu operation keys ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. Menu operation keys ENTER DISPLAY RETURN DISPLAY • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. Numeric keys MEMORY 10 ENT TV TV operation keys INPUT MUTE Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT TV VOL Select an item. TV CH CODE SET 3 CODE SET External device operation keys POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. h j Press the input selection key. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack. 4 Switches information on the display. Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code. Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. g Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.123). • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2. • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.51). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 124 RECEIVER SOURCE SOURCE z SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION External device operation keys RETURN 2 DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 7 8 9 10 0 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET TV operation keys TV z CODE SET 3 4 b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is learned. SOURCE blinks twice. If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5. Press one of the following keys depending on the type of your device. For TV: press TV z. Numeric keys MEMORY For TV: TV operation keys Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys, external device operation keys Press CODE SET. Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. Menu operation keys ENTER Perform the following steps within 10 seconds. a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to assign a function. The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work after you register the remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function to each key. TUNER ZONE 2 5 (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) AUDIO MAIN Programming from other remote controls (learning) Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”. 6 Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are learned. 7 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks once. Note • If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following steps. a Press CODE SET. Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls at each other. b Press RECEIVER. c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”. Remote control of external device 4 RECEIVER 3 V-AUX SOURCE 2 7 AV 1 6 4 5 3 NET USB AUDIO 2 HDMI OUT MULTI PARTY VOLUME 1 4 SCENE MUTE POP-UP/MENU PHONO RADIO ZONE 2 3 TUNER 2 NET MAIN 1 TV PROGRAM BD/DVD TOP MENU 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 125 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 1 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 OPTION Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. ENTER For playback device: press the input selection key. RETURN For TV: press TV z. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 4 PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 7 8 10 0 MUTE 2 Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV z. 3 Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”. Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1. Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”. Press the key that you want to reset. ENT If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2. TV TV z INPUT TV VOL Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. Numeric keys MEMORY 9 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks twice. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) ■ Clearing the assignment for each key SCENE 1 ■ Clearing the assignments for each input source Input selection keys TUNER MAIN Clearing functions learned from other remote controls TV CH CODE SET CODE SET 5 Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are cleared. 6 Press CODE SET. SOURCE blinks once. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 126 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE Resetting remote control codes RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can reset a remote control code registered to each input selection key. AUDIO Input selection keys 1 SOURCE blinks twice. TUNER MAIN Press CODE SET. ZONE 2 Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 2 3 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press the input selection key. Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”. OPTION Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks twice. ENTER RETURN If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1. DISPLAY BAND To reset the remote control to factory default settings MODE TUNING PRESET a Press CODE SET. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC b Press RECEIVER. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 9 0 c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”. 3 7 4 8 Numeric keys MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET CODE SET CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 127 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network RECEIVER SOURCE AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 3 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.122). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.118). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.122). Information icon A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 0 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 8 MEMORY 10 ENT TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH CODE SET Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 128 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.103). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.107). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.112). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.107). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.112). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.120). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.89). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 129 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.116). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.119). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.117). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 130 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120). The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.123). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to V-AUX. Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.127). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external device are weak. Replace with new batteries. External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. Remedy The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. The remote control does not learn new functions. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) compatible with the remote control. Memory capacity is full. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.125). Learning is impossible in this case. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions (p.126). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 131 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.107). The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.106). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.103). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.105). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.89). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.105). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.104). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.109). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 132 Problem No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.109). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.109). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. Noise/hum is heard. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.117). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.82). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.121). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.143). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26 to 29). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 133 Problem The video is interrupted. Cause Remedy (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.49). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.82). Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. FM/AM radio Problem (U.S.A. model only) Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.90). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. (Except for U.S.A. model) Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.91). Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.58). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.58). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A. model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.59). The unit does not receive HD Radio signals. (U.S.A. model only) The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.90). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 134 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.110). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.110). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.72). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.111). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.72). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.111). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.122). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit does not detect the PC. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 135 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.72). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.65). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.120). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.72). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. No device Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 136 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 137 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color reproduction than the composite video signal system. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 138 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 139 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Video device The unit HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y m 480p/576p S VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i 480i/ 576i m m m m m 1080p S VIDEO in 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in S VIDEO VIDEO out out COMPONENT VIDEO out S VIDEO out S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m VIDEO in m m m m m m m VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO 480i/576i m m: Available APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 140 Multi-zone output Information on HDMI ■ Audio output Using the unit’s internal amplifier (p.23) HDMI Control Using an external amplifier (p.81) Zone2 Out EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks In HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*1) m (*2) Digital audio (HDMI) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m USB (including iPod) m m Network sources m m TUNER m m HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.31). Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization m: Available *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) ■ Video output Zone2 Out In MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO m HDMI video Component video S-video Composite video m HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*4) Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV m m Operations available from the unit’s remote control m: Available *3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.50) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.124) APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 141 (Example) 7 HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and “Standby Sync”). 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 142 HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 143 Reference diagram (rear panel) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB C TRIGGER OUT PR AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) 0.1A 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L CENTER R FRONT L R ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP AC IN L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 144 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This receiver supports network connections. Android™ Android is a trademark of Google Inc. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 145 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) • Video - Dolby TrueHD - Composite x 1 - Dolby Digital Plus - S-video x 1 - Dolby Digital - Component x 1 - DTS-HD Master Audio AV OUT - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS Express - S-video x 1 - DTS Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX) Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2) • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*) • Video Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) S-video x 4 (AV 1–4) Component x 4 (AV 1–4) • HDMI Input • Audio Format MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT * barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2) Other jacks • YPAO MIC x 1 • REMOTE IN x 1 - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported MHL • Video Format (Repeater Mode) HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*) • REMOTE OUT x 1 - VGA * V-AUX: MHL input compatible • TRIGGER OUT x 2 - 480i/60 Hz • Others • RS-232C x 1 NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Output jacks • Analog Audio - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R*1) *1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R) • DC OUT x 1 HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz TUNER - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - Audio x 1 (AV OUT) - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2) - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz Optical x 1 (AV OUT) - 576p/50 Hz • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) • Digital Audio - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz USB x 1 (USB2.0) - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Analog Tuner [U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER) APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 146 USB • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A Network • PC Client Function • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 • AirPlay supported • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 ) Center ........................................................................135 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) • Internet Radio (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) Compatible Decoding Formats [China, Korea, Asia and General models] • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX Front L/R .....................................................................165 W/ch Center.........................................................................165 W/ch Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Total Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more • Output Level / Output Impedance ............................................................................ 0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV) [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]... 86 dB or more [Other models] ................................................... 81 dB or more AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV) ......................................................................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) .................................................................60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz Zone2 AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k Bass Boost/Cut ............................ ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100  Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz Front L/R .............................................................110 W+110 W PRE OUT Treble Boost/Cut........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) Center ............................................................................. 110 W SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k Surround L/R.......................................................110 W+110 W Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R .............................................................120 W+120 W Center ............................................................................. 120 W Surround L/R.......................................................120 W+120 W • Frequency Response AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ................................+0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) ..................................................................................12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct. PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 147 Video Section AM section • Video Signal Type • Tuning Range [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Other models].................................................................... PAL [Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz • Video Signal Level Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75  S-video General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  [General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz ..................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75  [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75  [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz Component Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75  • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model].................................................... 490 W/620 VA ....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more [Canada model] ................................................. 400 W/510 VA • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .....60 dB or more [Korea model] .................................................................390 W • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) ............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Other models] ................................................................490 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off [General model] .............................................. 0.35 W (Typical) [Other models] .................................................. 0.3 W (Typical) HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 4.5 W (Typical) HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals) [Asia and General models] .......................................................................... 4.5 W (Typical) .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz Network Standby On ......................................... 2.2 W (Typical) [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]..................... 72 dB/70 dB HD [U.S.A. model] ........................................................... 80 dB • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ...........................................1190 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”) * Including legs and protrusions • Weight ...........................................................15.1 kg (33.3 lbs) • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]........................ 0.3%/0.5% HD [U.S.A. model] .......................................................... 0.03% * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Antenna Input ................................................75  unbalanced APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 148 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 116 128 Numerics 16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 108 2.1-channel system 17 2ch Stereo (sound program) 55 3.1-channel system 17 4K signal (video signal resolution) 143 5.1-channel system 17 5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103 5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21 5ch BI-AMP +SB (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103 5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22 7.1+2-channel system 16 7.1-channel system 16 7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103 7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22 7ch Stereo (sound program) 55 A Access denied (error indication) 136 Access error (error indication) 136 Action Game (sound program) 54 Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 88 Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 107 ADVANCED SETUP menu 119 Advanced speaker configuration 20 Adventure (sound program) 54 AirPlay 77 Album (HD Radio™) 60 AM antenna connection 36 AM radio listening 58 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 109 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26 ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109 Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 60 Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 108 Audio Decoder (front display information) 86 Audio device connection 33 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 72 Audio file format (USB storage device) 69 AUDIO jack 25 Audio Mode (Option menu) 90 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 109 Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 60 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26 Audio Select (Option menu) 90 Audio Signal (Information menu) 118 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 116 Auto Preset (FM radio) 64 Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 62 Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41 Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 106 Automatic speaker setting optimization 41 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 64 Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 62 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 116 AV OUT jack 11 B 107 Backup/recovery of the settings 121 Banana plug 19 Basic playback operation 49 Basic speaker configuration 16 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 88 Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 105 Bi-amp speaker connection 23 Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Bitstream 143 C CAT-5 cable 37 Category (HD Radio™) 60 Cellar Club (sound program) 55 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 104 Center Image (Sound Program menu) 99 Center Width (Sound Program menu) 99 Chamber (sound program) 55 Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Check SP Wires (error indication) 136 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 47 CINEMA DSP 3D 53 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 88 CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 55 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 64 Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 62 Clearing (remote control) 126 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 62 COAXIAL jack 25 Component video cable 25 Component video connection (video device) 32 COMPONENT VIDEO jack 25 Composite video connection (video device) 33 Compressed Music Enhancer 57 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 103 Crossover frequency setting 105 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41 D DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 115 DC OUT jack 11 Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 98 Decoder Mode (Input menu) 93 Decoder Off (front display information) 86 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 110 Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 118 Default setting restoration 121 Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 106 Detail (Load, Scene menu) 96 Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 95 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 149 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 110 Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 89 Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 89 Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 89 Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 89 Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 89 Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 89 Dialogue normalization level 118 Digital coaxial cable 25 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 94 Digital optical cable 25 Dimension (Sound Program menu) 99 Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 114 Direct (Sound Program menu) 98 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 137 DISPLAY key 13 Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 114 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 105 Distance (YPAO measurement result) 45 DLNA 72 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 94 DMC Control (Input menu) 94 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 110 DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 118 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 89 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 56 Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 56 Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 56 Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 56 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 56 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 89 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 56 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 89 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 56 Drama (sound program) 54 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 137 DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 98 DSP Program (front display information) 86 DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 56 DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 89 Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 56 107 Front panel jack connection 34 Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) Function (Setup menu) 114 E G ECO (Setup menu) 116 ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 117 Enhancer (Option menu) 90 ENHANCER (sound mode) 57 ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 54 Error indication (front display) 136 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 89 EXTD Surround (Option menu) 89 Extended Surround (Option menu) 89 External device control (remote control) 123 External device operation key (remote control) 13 External power amplifier 24, 81 Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 105 GND terminal 34 Ground lead 34 F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 111 FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 122 Firmware update 122 Firmware update (network) 122, 128 Firmware update (USB) 122 Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 118 Firmware version check 122 FM antenna connection 36 FM Mode (Option menu) 91 FM radio listening 58 FM/AM radio tuning 58 Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 58 Frequency step setting 58, 120 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 103 Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 98 Front display (part names and functions) 10 Front display brightness 114 Front display information 86 Front panel (part names and functions) 8 Front panel door (front panel) 8 104 H Hall in Munich (sound program) 55 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 55 HD Radio™ information 60 HD Radio™ tuning 60 HDMI (Setup menu) 109 HDMI cable 25 HDMI connection (video device) 31 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 109 HDMI jack 25 HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 118 HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 110 HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 110 HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113 HDMI output selection 49 HDMI signal compatibility 143 Headphones 53 Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 98 High definition audio 143 High speed HDMI cable 25 Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 61 I In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 89 Indicator (part names and functions) 10 INFO key 9, 13 Information display (front display) 10 Information menu 117 Information switching (front display) 86 Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98 Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 107 Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112 INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 150 Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 114 Input jack assignment 114 Input menu 92 Input selection key (remote control) 13 Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 89 Internal Error (error indication) 136 Internal Error (YPAO error message) 47 Internet radio listening 75 IP Address (Network, Information menu) 118 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 110 iPod charge 65 iPod connection 65 iPod content playback 66 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 77 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 77 L Language (Setup menu) 117 Learning (remote control) 125 Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 98 Level (Sound Program menu) 98 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 105 Level (YPAO measurement result) 45 Level Error (YPAO warning message) 48 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 138 Lipsync 138 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 106 LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 55 Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98 Load (Scene menu) 95 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 138 M MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 111 MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 118 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 111 Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 112 Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 103 Manual speaker configuration 103 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 59 Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 107 Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112 Measurement result (YPAO) 45 Media sharing setup 72 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 116 Menu language selection 40 Menu operation key (front panel) 9 Menu operation key (remote control) 13 MHL cable 25 MHL connection 35 MHL jack 25 MHL Overloaded (error indication) 136 MHL-compatible mobile device 35 MODE key 13 Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 98 Monaural reception (FM radio) 58 Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 58 Monitor check 121 MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121 Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113 Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113 Mono Movie (sound program) 54 MOVIE (sound program category) 54 MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 54 MULTI CH INPUT jack 12 Multi measurement (YPAO) 44 Multi Zone (Information menu) 118 Multi Zone (Setup menu) 112 Multi-channel analog connection 38 Multiple room playback 79 Multi-zone 79 Multi-zone output 141 MUSIC (sound program category) 55 Music Video (sound program) 54 MUTE key 13 Muting 49 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) NAS connection 37 37 NAS content playback 72 Network (Information menu) 118 Network (Setup menu) 110 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37 Network cable 37 Network connection 37 Network information 118 Network Name (Network, Information menu) 118 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 111 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 111 No content (error indication) 136 No device (error indication) 136 No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 47 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 47 No MIC (YPAO error message) 47 No Signal (YPAO error message) 47 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 47 Noisy (YPAO error message) 47 Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120 Numeric key (remote control) 13 O ON SCREEN key 13 OPTICAL jack 25 OPTION key 13 Option menu 87 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 48 Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 48 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120 Panorama (Sound Program menu) 99 Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 105 PARTY key 13 Party mode 85 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113 PC connection 37 PC content playback 72 PHONES jack 9 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 151 PHONO jack 11 Playback device connection 31 Playback device operation (remote control) 124 Please wait (error indication) 136 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 103 Power cable connection 39 Power management 116 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 115 PRE OUT jack 12 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 59 Program Service (Radio Data System) 62 Program Type (Radio Data System) 62 Pure Direct 57 PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 57 Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 107 Q Q factor 106 R Radio Data System (FM radio) 62 Radio Data System information 62 Radio Data System tuning 62 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 62 Rear panel (part names and functions) 11 Recording device connection 37 RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 136 REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120 Remote connection 83 Remote control (part names and functions) 13 Remote control code registration (playback device) 124 Remote control code registration (TV) 123 Remote Control Code Search 123, 124 Remote control ID setting 120 Remote control ID setting (remote control) 120 Remote control sensor 8 Remote control sensor setting 120 Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 13 Remote ID (System, Information menu) 118 REMOTE IN jack 11 Remote Off (error indication) 136 REMOTE OUT jack 11 REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120 Rename (input name) 93 Rename (network name) 111 Rename (scene name) 96 Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 93 Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 96 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 68 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 74 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 71 Reset (remote control) 127 Reset (Scene menu) 96 Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 108 Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 98 Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 98 Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 98 Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 54 Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98 Router connection 37 S S VIDEO jack 25 Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118 Save (Scene menu) 95 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 47 Scene configuration 51 SCENE function 50 SCENE link playback 51 Scene menu 94 Sci-Fi (sound program) 54 Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 103 Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 103 Setup menu 100 Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 114 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 68 Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 74 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 71 Signal information 118 SILENT CINEMA 53 Simple play (iPod) 67 Single measurement (YPAO) 43 Size (YPAO measurement result) 45 SLEEP key 13 Sleep timer 13 Sleep timer (Zone2) 85 Sound (Setup menu) 106 Sound field effect 53 Sound mode selection 52 Sound program 54, 55 Sound Program menu 97 Speaker (Setup menu) 103 Speaker cable connection 19 Speaker connection 15 SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 119 Speaker impedance 15 Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 118 Speaker impedance setting 18, 119 Speaker indicator (front display) 10 Speaker placement 16 Spectacle (sound program) 54 Sports (sound program) 54 Standard (sound program) 54 Standby indicator (front panel) 8 Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 110 Station Info (HD Radio™) 60 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 59 Status (Network, Information menu) 118 STEREO (sound program subcategory) 55 Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 25 Stereo reception (FM radio) 58 Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 58 STP network cable 37 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 56 Straight decode 56 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 110 Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 118 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 152 Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 104 Subwoofer connection 19 Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 90 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 56 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 104 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 104 Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98 Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98 Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98 Surround decoder 56 Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98 Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98 Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98 S-video cable 25 S-video connection (video device) 32 SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 90 System (Information menu) 118 System ID (System, Information menu) 118 TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 26 TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 28 TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29 TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120 TV Format (System, Information menu) 118 TV operation (remote control) 123 TV operation key (remote control) 13 T VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 122 Version error (error indication) 136 Video (Setup menu) 108 VIDEO AUX jack 9 Video device connection 31 VIDEO jack 25 Video Mode (Option menu) 90 Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 108 Video Out (Input menu) 93 Video pin cable 25 Video Signal (Information menu) 118 Video signal flow 140 Video signal type setting 120 Virtual CINEMA DSP 53 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7 Voltage selection 39 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11 Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112 Volume Interlock (Input menu) 93 Volume Trim (Option menu) 89 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7 Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 115 Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 106 The Bottom Line (sound program) 55 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 55 Tone Control (Option menu) 88 TONE/BALANCE key 9 TP (Traffic Program) 63 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 63 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 63 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 88 Trigger function 38 Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 115 TRIGGER OUT jack 11 Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 115 Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 115 Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 118 TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120 Turntable connection 34 TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109 TV connection 26 U Unable to play (error indication) 136 USB jack 9 USB mass storage class device 69 USB Overloaded (error indication) 136 USB storage device connection 69 USB storage device content playback 69 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 47 V W Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 114 Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 45 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer YPAO error message 47 YPAO MIC jack 9 YPAO microphone 41 YPAO warning message 48 41 Z Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 112 Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113 Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113 Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 112 Zone2 speaker connection 23, 80 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 153 © 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF341A0/EN